Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

Introduction In this tutorial. 1 . You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. Finally. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.

2 .

NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. and plumbing engineering workflows. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. and piping. such as duct. fixtures. electrical panels. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. and plumbing fixtures. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. Add basic MEP elements. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. 3 . such as mechanical equipment. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. electrical. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. Germany. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. Add more detailed modelling elements.

they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. On the Contents tab. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Create detail views. as well as how to open and save them. annotations.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. you can choose to save your work. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . when you add ductwork. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Create schedules. templates. You do not design entire systems. Metric file names have an _m suffix. For example. When you install the training files as instructed. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Metric: files for users working with metric units. you learn where the training files are located. After completing each exercise. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In this exercise. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. your Training folder may be in a different location. such as templates and families. views. and sheets to document the project. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. and tags. is located and accessed in the training files location. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. Contact your CAD manager for more information. For example. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. However. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. however. NOTE Depending on your installation. When you open a training file. So. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. to provide a richer and more finished design. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial.

and you can open any supported file type. enter the new file name. select the folder in which to save the new file. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. you are prompted to save the changes. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. For File name. a list of file types displays. double-click Imperial or Metric. click ➤ Save As. verify that Project Files (*. and click Save.rvt and make changes. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. You may close the file with or without saving changes. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. 8 If you have made changes. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Accessing Training Files | 5 . 4 Click the training file name. For example. scroll down. the Open dialog displays.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu.rvt. if you open settings. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close.rvt) is selected. For Files of type. and click Open. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise.

6 .

the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. and phases when you need it. quantities. If you move the partition. the operation of the software is parametric. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. 2D and 3D view. In this case. sections. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. As you work in drawing and schedule views. the floor or roof remains connected. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. In this case. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. schedules. ■ ■ 7 . scope. and plans. and schedules required for a building project.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. the hierarchy of elements. You learn the terminology. If the length of the elevation is changed. hence. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. In the Revit MEP model. drawing sheets. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. drawings. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. every drawing sheet. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. the parameter is one of association or connection.

For example. For example. and keynotes are annotation elements. boilers. and reference planes are datum elements. walls and ceilings are hosts. They display in relevant views of the design. Examples include detail lines. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. dimensions. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. dimensions. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. filled regions. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. sinks. tags. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. For example. and electrical panels. sprinklers. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. For example. boilers. sprinklers. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . They help to describe or document the design. levels. grids. ducts. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. ducts. sinks. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. and electrical panels. and 2D detail components. Datum elements help to define project context. When you change something. tags. For example.

you do nothing to establish these relationships. such as roofs. programming is not required. By using a single project file. For example. In Revit MEP. you can explicitly control them. families. and types. top of wall. Most often. first floor. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. views of the project. Project: In Revit MEP. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. you must be in a section or elevation view. In other cases. and ceilings. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. schedules. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. or bottom of foundation. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. and so forth). the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. Often. elevation views. The project file contains all information for the building design. and drawings of the design. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. floors.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. However. To place levels. from geometry to construction data. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. section views. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. This information includes components used to design the model. for example. If you can draw. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. North .

For example. showing. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. identical use. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. hiding. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. Then experiment with them. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. System families can be transferred between projects. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. For example. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). A type can also be a style. and wires.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Unlike system and standard component families. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. Type: Each family can have several types. pipes. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. such as a 30” X 42” title block. For example. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. With a few clicks. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. You can also display several project views at one time. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. and similar graphical representation. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. System families include ducts. or layer the views to see only the one on top. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). However. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. each in-place family contains only a single type. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. A type can be a specific size of a family. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow.

and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. To return the panel to the ribbon. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order.

. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. When working on the Modify tab. data and systems. and settings. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. and CAD files. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. tools used for editing existing elements. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. architect-specific tools. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . project and system parameters. tools used for running analysis on the current design. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. then select what you want to modify. and for switching views.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. select the tool first..

Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. For example. displays frequently used tools.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. To keep a panel expanded. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. when adding duct. By default. closes the application menu (double-click). This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. provides access to common tools. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. provides requested information. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects.

. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. select a file to open. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. click. (Open) save the current drawing.. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. (Export) On the application menu. select a template and create a new drawing..The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. such as Export and Publish.. (Save As) export the current drawing. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name.

customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. (Licensing) close the file. (Print) access product and license information. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. publish the current project. Camera. family. annotation. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . saves a current project. to. family. To enable or disable a tool item. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project.. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. annotation. but is not enabled by default. (Publish) print the current drawing... click. or template file.On the application menu. and Walkthrough. provides views including Default 3D. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. or template file. enters selection mode and ends the current operation.

Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. When you are highlighting an element or component. when you switch to another editing mode. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. displaying the same information. To show the Status Bar again. Clear the Status Bar check mark. In addition. Modify. Clipboard. or the Family Editor. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. To hide the Status Bar. This displays the command history in a list. Group.To undo or redo a series of operations. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. workshared components. However. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. repeat the command. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. check the Status Bar. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. When you are using a command. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Starting with the most recent command. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures).

To cancel or exit the current command. for example. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Place a Wall. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. click (Modify). View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. When you place an element in a drawing. On the Quick Access toolbar. select one or more elements of the same category. To change existing elements to a different type.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click Training Files. For example. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. Zoom the view In the tutorials.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. In the following steps. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise.rvt. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. There are several ways to access zoom options. 1 Click ➤ Open. After you are familiar with these tasks.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view.

SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 6 Click in the drawing area. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. NOTE As you zoom in and out. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. the view zooms in on the selected area. click . To modify or add snap increments. When you release the mouse button. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. 9 To display SteeringWheels. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). In the drawing area. Modifying the View | 19 . NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. on the Navigation bar. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window.

As you move the mouse. and then using the Zoom tool again. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. and click tin the Options dialog. For more information about SteeringWheels. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. ➤ Options. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. 14 To exit the wheel. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. moving the wheel to the desired location. click the SteeringWheels tab. To define settings for SteeringWheels. Click and drag to orbit the design. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. press ESC. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights.

Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Enter ZR. Small blue dots.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. bottoms. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. Similar controls. as shown. After you are familiar with these tasks. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct.Design. These are the drag controls.HVAC Plan . called drag controls. and select the duct.Design ➤ Floor Plans. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. display along the ends. referred to as shape handles. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. and open Level 2 . it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. In this example. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). on the Standard toolbar. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is.3 Click and drag the bottom control. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. All changes you make to a project are tracked. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. click the Undo command. or press CTRL+Z. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 6 On the Undo menu. select the first item in the list. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Move.

click to specify the starting position. and drag it to the left as shown. 11 With the duct already selected. After selecting the element to move. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . require 2 clicks to complete the command. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. and click again to specify the ending position. for example. such as Move and Copy. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. you want to move the duct. In this case. The duct is moved to the new position.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. as shown. 10 Move the cursor to the right. Some commands.

click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct.End a command Some commands. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. such as the Modify Ducts command.Return. 14 Enter VG. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. Press ESC twice. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. Select Mechanical .Supply. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . For example. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 13 To end a command.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. 5 In the New Project dialog. such as ducts and pipes. 2 In the New Project dialog. link files. 27 . select Project. the default building levels and standard views. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. New projects inherit all the families. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. In that case. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. Finally. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. you learn how to start a project from a template. under Template file. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. such as coordination review and interference checking. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. click Browse. and click Open. click Training files. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. You can choose from several templates.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. use copy/monitor. under Create new. and loadable families. and modify system settings. 6 Click OK. create and manage views. settings. and geometry from the starting template. such as the default project units and settings. You can either select a template from the template library. system families.rte template.

9 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Browse). for Energy Data. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation).rte template and click Open. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. For example. for City. select School or University. select Manchester. Click OK twice. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. select Level 1. ■ ■ Under Create new. 8 In the drawing area. ■ For Building Construction. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . create another new project using the Construction template. NH. 10 Using the same method. For Location. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. (Browse). Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. review the construction materials listed. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. under Energy Analysis. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK. you can select it now. click Edit. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. When you select the material. If you want to use a template other than the default. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template.7 In the Project Browser. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. Click Cancel. click Browse. navigate to Imperial Templates. In the Choose Template dialog. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. select Project template. and open North.

click Rectangular. click Wiring. After standard settings have been established for an organization. 11 1/2". Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. and 12 1/2". click Round. under Pipe Settings. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 23 In the left pane. 24 In the right pane. Click OK twice.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. 27 Click OK. select Views. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. under Duct Settings. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 22 In the right pane. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. for 3/4". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. 5 1/2". and fire protection systems. 33 Click OK. 4 1/2". ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. and 5 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 10 1/2". piping. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. power distribution systems. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . Holding CTRL. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 4 1/2". ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. for 3 1/2". 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. select Identity Data. 25 In the left pane. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. For Ground Wire Tick Mark.rfa and click Open. For Categories. under Duct Settings. click Sizes. and demand factors for electrical systems. plumbing. wiring. 26 In the right pane. for 3 1/2". Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family.

You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. click Training. sheets.Origin to Origin. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . To enable this coordination. families. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. select View Name. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. Notice that the file is saved as a template. select Associated Level. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open.rvt. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. In addition.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. and groups that are contained in a project. For Then by. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. under Create new. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. You need to create the MEP model for the project. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. 38 Close the file. From the Positioning list. click Browse. 2 In the New Project dialog. select Family and Type. Select Ascending Click OK twice. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 4 In the New Project dialog. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. 5 Click OK. select Sub-Discipline. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. select Project. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. select Auto . Click Open. For Sort by. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. Linking Projects In this exercise. under Template file. For Then by.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

and click OK twice. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library.11 In the Places dialog. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. templates. or families. click My Library. and click Open. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and change the name to My Library. Load. Save. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and click (Browse). and Import dialogs. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. click (Add Value). and select it as the library path. 15 Under Library Name. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . ➤ Open. click the My Library icon.

11 In the Options dialog. click the Spelling tab. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 3 Under Settings. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 21 On the File Locations tab. 22 Select My Library. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 20 Click ➤ Options. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 27 Click OK. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 19 Click Cancel. 5 In the text editor. click Places. This path is determined during installation. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click Edit. 2 In the Options dialog. and decal image files. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . click OK. 12 Create a new project using the default template. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. view the current path. If you work in a large office. 23 Click 24 Click OK. If you want to relocate this path. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. specify the new location here. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. click Edit. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 14 Click in the drawing area. select Ignore words in uppercase. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 9 In the text editor. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. such as bump maps. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. custom color files.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path.

delete sheetmtl-CU. under Dimension Snaps. click Browse. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 6 In the Snaps dialog. 4 In the New Project dialog. click Edit. click OK. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. work with snapping turned off. 20 Under Settings. 25 Close the file without saving it.. 19 In the Options dialog. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click the Spelling tab. and enter 1 . 21 Under Personal dictionary. 18 Click ➤ Options. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click OK. click Training Files. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. you modify snap increments. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. 23 In the text editor. In this exercise. you modify snap settings. click File menu ➤ Save. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. You can turn snap settings on and off. As you zoom in and out within a view. click Restore Defaults. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . 2 In the New Project dialog. 22 In the text editor. 24 In the Options dialog. under Template file.rte. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click Close. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.17 In the Spelling dialog.

This is the increment that you added previously. 10 On the Options Bar. and move the cursor to the right. enter SM. click OK. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. use the wheel button on your mouse. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. For example.7 Under Object Snaps. snapping reverts to the system default settings. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. If it does not. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. TIP To zoom while sketching. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. deselect Chain. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. If you do not have a wheel button. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. zoom out until it does so. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. such as ZO to zoom out. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. 8 In the Snaps dialog. While sketching.

19 Enter SM. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. it will snap to the endpoints. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. If you move the cursor along the wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. and delete the value 1’ . 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and the wall edges. 22 Move the cursor downward. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 25 Click OK. with or without saving it. and specify the wall endpoint. 26 Close the file. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Do not set the wall end point. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. and move the cursor to the right. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. the midpoint..14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Notice that snapping is once again active. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall.

You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 .Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.

44 .

go to http://www. you can choose to save your work. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. methodology. water source heat pump (WSHP). and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. duct system and a hydronic piping system. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. This system consists of a cooling tower. you first plan the system. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. you design a mechanical system for an office building. In this lesson. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. At the end of the tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. In this exercise. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. After applying a color scheme to the zones. 45 . After finishing each exercise. As you create the mechanical system. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. By following the recommended workflow. and then you create a plenum level. If the tutorial training files are not present. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you first configure the linked architectural model. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. you will understand the process.autodesk. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. However.

rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In this section. and click OK. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Constraints. you add a level for plenums. NOTE When working with a linked file. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. These components are defined in the architectural training file. and after the linked model highlights. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Room Bounding. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. roof. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. not in the MEP training file. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. indicating that it’s the active view. Next. click to select it. ceilings.Space Plan is highlighted.

14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). The new level is placed. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. 9 On the Draw panel. enter 8'. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. and double-click West . Verify that Make Plan View is selected. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. 16 Press Esc.MEP. Preparing Spaces | 47 . 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. and enter Level 2 Plenum. and click OK. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). For Offset. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down.6 In the Project Browser. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). Click Plan View Types. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . and in the Plan View Types dialog. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level.

In this exercise. ■ Click OK twice. enter an Offset of 1' 0". you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. for Default View Template. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. for View Scale. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. select Plenum Plan.Plenum. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For View Classification. Under View Depth. right-click Level 2 Plenum. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . In this exercise. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. and click Apply Default View Template. right-click Level 2 Plenum. select MEP . In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. and then place spaces in various types of areas. and click Properties. Under Extents.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. for Top. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. For Cut plane. 20 In the Project Browser. 21 Close the file with or without saving it.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. select Design. Under Identity Data. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. In the next exercise. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. For Sub-Discipline. for Level. NOTE After finishing each exercise. you place spaces in areas of the building model. select Level Above (Level 3). Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. click Edit. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. and for Offset. However. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. enter 0. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. you can choose to save your work. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. for View Range.

■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. For Upper Limit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. walls. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down.Space Plan is highlighted. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view. and ceilings). 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.rvt. click Training Files. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. select New. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter 0. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For Offset. For (Tag Location). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Placing Spaces | 49 . Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. For Space. select Level 2 Plenum. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. select Horizontal.

and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . enter 219. for Number. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 14 In the drawing area. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden.7 Click to place the space. 9 Select the space.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). For Name. enter Library. ensuring coordination between the files. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view.

Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. Placing Spaces | 51 . 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. For Upper Limit. enter 0. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. select Level 3. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 21 Using the method learned previously. For Offset. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 20 Click in the Library to place the space.

24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you place a space in a large corridor area. and then split the space using a space separation line. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. under Energy Analysis. 23 Click OK.

Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down.rvt. 5 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. for Upper Limit.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter 0. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.Space Plan is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. click Training Files. select Level 3. and then press Esc. and for Offset. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. the plan view would have updated with the changes.7 In the Project Browser. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. 11 Close the schedule view. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. and scroll to the newly placed space. and press Enter. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. 9 In the floor plan. as shown. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. 10 Using the same method. which was numbered 219Q. In the schedule. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. double-click the space name. enter Corridor. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . change the space number to 216A.

15 Press Esc twice. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. place a space in the lower area of the split space. 16 Using the method learned previously. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. The new space is numbered correctly (216B).

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you place a space in a chase. click Training Files. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. indicating that it’s the active view. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. If necessary.Space Plan is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.rvt. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point.

and click Element Properties. For Number. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter 4'. For Limit Offset. and then click OK. 6 Enter VG. for Name. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. For Offset. enter Chase. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . ■ ■ 14 Click OK.4 Press Esc. click in the chase area to place the space. 12 Click in the section view. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. 10 In the plan view. expand Spaces. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. select Roof Level. On the Options Bar. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. select the space. enter 0. for Upper Limit. for Upper Limit. enter 225PC. right-click. select Interior and Reference. In the plan view. select Level 3. Under Identity Data.

floors. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. under Loaded Tags. All spaces in the view are tagged. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and click OK. 17 Type ZF. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. In the next exercises.Bounding elements (such as walls. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. ceilings. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Space Plan. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . select Space Tag With Volume. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. and maximize the view. 15 Press Esc.

Notice that Default is currently the only zone. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ).Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. under Spaces. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. it is automatically added to the Default zone. click View ➤ Zones. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.Zoning is highlighted. In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. indicating that it’s the active view. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. To display space reference lines. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. click Reference. After a space is placed in an area. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. which removes the space from the Default zone.rvt. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

under Energy Analysis. you assign spaces to zones in the building. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. and click Finish Editing Zone. Next. the Edit Zone tab displays. Instruction 221. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. and click OK. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. and verify the zones in the System Browser. click Reference.rvt. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. and modify the zone properties. To display space reference lines. under Spaces. you assign spaces to a zone. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. you can add or remove a space from the zone. select Occupiable. 4 In the drawing area. and Electrical 220 spaces.5 In the System Browser. click Training Files. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. The Zone tool is active. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The graphic in the System Browser updates. and a new zone is created. select Computer Lab 222. indicating that the space is occupiable. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Using the Edit Zone tab. double-click 121 Cafeteria. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Zoning is highlighted. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. As you do this. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.

Expand HVAC Zones. type VG.In the System Browser. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . 5 With the drawing area active. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). select HVAC Zones. you need to activate the zone visibility. Click OK. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). Instruction. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. To view the zone in the drawing area. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab.

enter 2 . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. expand 2 .TIP After you finish editing the zone. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.West . Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. click Reference. indicating that it’s the active view.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. You activated zone visibility in the views. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. click Training Files. and verify the zone in the System Browser. To display space reference lines. under Identity Data. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone.Zoning. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building.rvt. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. click Finish Editing Zone. 9 In the System Browser. and click OK.Area B. for Name. 10 On the Edit Zone tab.Zoning is highlighted. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.West . under Spaces. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Close the System Browser. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone.

5 Click in the Level 1 . click in the Level 2 . Select Attached End. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 15 Press Esc. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. zoom out. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Verify that the distance is 1/2". 9 With the Add Space tool active. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 8 In the Level 1 .Zoning view. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.Zoning floor plan. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.Zoning view. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired.Zoning view to activate it.

and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. space.Zoning view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. double-click the zone tag. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Zoning to make it the active view. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. click the corner where the Top. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . Front. In this exercise. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.East. click Training Files. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. enter Lounge . and zone information. for Name Value. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. you verify the building. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. and click OK. double-click Level 1 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. on the ViewCube.

verify that Wireframe is selected. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. With 109 Lounge selected. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . you isolate the space. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. Next. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). and select 109 Lounge. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Using the Highlight tool. Click (Highlight). You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. click (Isolate). Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red.

you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. For Construction Type.■ On the Details tab. select Lounge/Recreation. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. select 109 Lounge. For Electrical Loads. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. and in the People dialog. Below the list of spaces and zones. and then click OK. click . All spaces in the zone display in isolation. click . You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. ■ ■ ■ Next. scroll down in the left pane. click . This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. select 1_South_Lounge. verify that <Building> is selected. Next. and click OK. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). the space information displays for the selected space. For People. and then click OK.

verify that 70. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. This indicates the cooling set point. cooling air temperature. click (Shading). Below the list of spaces and zones.00 °F : N/A is specified. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. For Heating Information. This indicates the heating set point.00 °F : N/A is specified. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point.00 °F : 90.00 °F : 54. verify that 74. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. roofs. and dehumidification set point. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. and air changes per hour. heating air temperature. and humidification set point.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. outdoor air per area. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. floors. For Cooling Information. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . verify that <Building> is selected. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. and other room-bounding components. Next. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. 12 Using the methods learned previously. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. the zone information displays for the selected zone. This indicates the outdoor air per person.

notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. select Level 3. for Number. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Under Energy Analysis. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. Under Energy Analysis. select Plenum. enter 212P. Click OK. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. Because this is an unoccupied space. 15 In the Project Browser. click Cancel. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). enter 0. For Offset. For Name. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. open MEP . and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Plenum. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for City. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. and verify that the space has replaced the void. For Postal Code. for Energy Data. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans.Space Plan. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Manchester. double-click Level 2 . 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click Training Files. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. For Location.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. In this exercise. you verified building.rvt. is selected. On the Place tab. NH. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select space Plenum 212P. click Edit. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. space. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. click in the Value field. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . select School or University. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. and zone information. under Energy Analysis. enter 03101. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information.

9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. For Space Type. select Specified.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. 8 In the drawing area. both. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. verify that Level 1 is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. For Sensible. ■ On the Weather tab. this option adjusts the times automatically. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. enter 200 Btu/h. select space Library 219. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. Select Area per person. a cooling load. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. and click OK. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. For Project Phase. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value column. For Condition Type. Under Heat Gain (per Person). you need to select this option. click Edit. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. For Export Complexity. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. enter 150 Btu/h. or neither. For Latent. select Heated and cooled. select Library . In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. ft. For Sliver Space Tolerance. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. and click OK. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. for Values. under Volume Computations. verify that New Construction is selected. and enter 50 sq.Audio Visual. In order to select a space. Click OK twice. and then click . right-click. For Building Construction. for Values. and click Element Properties. If. verify that <Building> is specified. For Ground Plane. verify that Occupiable is selected. verify that 1' 0" is specified. for Building Service. For People. select Specified. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). and click OK. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.

verify that Manchester. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. select 219 Library. for Values. Select the space associated with the warning.■ ■ ■ Click OK. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. You should correct the space error in the building model. Under Power. For Building Construction. NH. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. You have verified the building information. Click OK twice. verify that School or University is selected. and click to learn the cause for the warning. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. and under Heating Information. For Electrical Loads. click Calculate. select Actual. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . it should be corrected before you calculate loads. click Edit. and can be modified here. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. verify that <Building> is specified. click Information). For Location. 12 Click the Details tab. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. select Actual. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. For Building Service. for Values. and click OK. There should be no warnings displayed. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. Next. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. is specified.

click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . or zone information. or make any changes to the model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. space.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. In this exercise. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 21 Click OK. under Energy Analysis. 16 After you review the loads report. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. click to the right of the building to place the legend.rvt. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. For Color Scheme. Click OK.Space Plan. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. select HVAC Zones. select 219 Library. and zone information for the building model. space. click Training Files. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. 3 In the drawing area. 19 In the drawing area. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. weather. 17 In the loads report. and a loads report displays. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. 15 Review the loads report for project. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i.

The new scheme displays in the view. select Tonnage Range. and click OK. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . select the color scheme legend. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. in 1-ton increments. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. under Schemes.5 Zoom in to the legend.

open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 11 Using the method learned previously. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

If you select Show categories from all disciplines. more category options are available. click Training Files. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. For Phase. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. select Spaces. Click OK. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. enter Space Airflow Schedule. Select Schedule building components. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. select Spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. In the next exercise.12 Close the file with or without saving it. select New Construction. In this exercise. for Select available fields from. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Name.Space Fill is the active view. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i.rvt. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model.

For Then by. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. For Discipline. select HVAC. click (Browse). add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. For Formula.■ Under Available fields. and Blank line. select Level. In the Calculated Value dialog. select Calculated Supply Airflow. Select Formula. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. select Level.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. For Fields. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Airflow Delta. select Not Between. and then click . For Type. ■ Click Calculated Value. Select Ascending. for Formula. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Number. and click OK. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. enter Airflow Delta. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. select Air Flow. Header. Click OK. In the Fields dialog. and then click Conditional Format. and then select Hidden field. enter . In the Schedule Properties dialog. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields.

When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . Under Conditions to Use. ■ The schedule displays. For Background Color. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. verify that Show is highlighted. select red. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. Click OK twice. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. In the next lesson. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. right-click to access schedule properties. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. In the Color dialog. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. In this exercise. a view opens that contains the selected space. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. click the color swatch. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. In later exercises.■ ■ ■ For Value.

78 .

you will create supply air systems. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. After system creation. you modify air terminal parameters. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. Then. 79 . and work with the airflow schedule.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. As you place the air terminals. In this lesson. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). After completing the air systems lesson. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms.

and scroll to space 223. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. the space crossing lines display. click Training Files.rvt. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 In the ceiling view. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

Also. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. as shown. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. the hosted elements are updated as well. select the diffuser. 13 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Placement panel. and press Enter. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. and select Supply Diffuser . verify that Constrain is cleared.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . If the host element is modified or moved. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. The schedule updates with the new flow data. click Place on Face. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. for Flow.Rectangular Face Round Neck . 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. 15 On the Options Bar. which in this case is the ceiling grid. and press Enter. 17 Move the cursor down. enter 425 CFM. type 12. and then press Esc to end the command. and then select both Copy and Multiple. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host.

25 In the drawing area. 22 In the drawing area. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Place on Face. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. click Yes. select one of the diffusers. 21 On the Options Bar. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. and then press Esc.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 27 Select Return Diffuser . Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Open. 29 Place 2 diffusers. As you place the return diffusers. clear Leader. Next. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. as shown. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 24 In the Open dialog. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 28 On the Placement tab.rfa.

33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. under Other. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . select Strong Reference. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 32 In the Project Browser.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 31 In the alert dialog. and click to select the lines. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. select one of the return diffusers. for Reference. click Yes. Level. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. and click OK. as shown. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. ■ ■ For the end point. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. for Constraints ➤ Offset. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. enter 9' 0"2750. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 44 Zoom in to space 115. For the start point. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click OK. click the Level 1 line. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 .

Press Esc. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. indicating that it’s the active view. including energy analysis. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. After creating the logical connection. You then create the logical connection between the system components. However. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.Design is highlighted. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. and click View ➤ Systems. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry.rvt. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. the space crossing lines display. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment.HVAC Plan . This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. When you highlight a space. In this exercise. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. right-click the title. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. 15 Click Cancel. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. 6 Keep the System Browser open. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. 11 In the drawing area. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. System Name. Connect Into. As you add diffusers to systems. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. the number of elements is updated. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. and Flow value. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . review the Number of Elements. 12 In the System Browser. On the Options Bar.

for Mark. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. In this exercise. In this exercise. the air terminals are the children. 18 Click OK. for System Name. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. which updates the name in the System Browser. under Mechanical. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. 22 Click OK. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Rename the system Next. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. 26 Click Finish Editing System. under Identity Data. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 25 Click OK.17 Using the method learned previously. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. and the system connects them.

Also. 5 On the Options Bar. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. A Generate Layout tab displays. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . When you highlight a space using the cursor.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 In the drawing area. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. indicating that it’s the active view. for Solution Type.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . the space crossing lines display.rvt.HVAC Plan. select Network. and display solution 1.Design is highlighted. which provides various layout tools. click Training Files. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. the Network type provides several solutions. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. In this case. select the upper left diffuser.

enter 9' 10 1/2". select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. Select Branch. For Flex Duct Type. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. For Offset. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers.7 On the Options Bar. For Duct Type. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. For Offset. enter 9' 10 1/2". click Settings. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . as shown. enter 3'.Round. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . For Duct Type. you’ll get an error in a later step. click Modify. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. Click OK.

NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Either relocate the system components. For example.11 Click Finish Layout. or manually modify the duct. as is the elbow itself. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . select a different layout solution. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. or offset elevations are incorrect. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork.

select By View. and then click OK. and click to select it. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. Using a flow-based color scheme. for Color Scheme. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. If the entire network does not highlight. Usually. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. select Duct Color Fill . a disconnection exists. fittings. and click OK. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. under Graphics.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. The first time you press Tab. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Flow. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. highlight a segment of the main duct. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. but not all values are used in this view. for Values Displayed. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. and equipment. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. thus it is not part of the system.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . 26 Click OK. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then press Esc to clear the selection. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). for Flow. select one of the diffusers in the system. and click OK. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. under Mechanical . for Schemes.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. and press Enter.Airflow. select Duct Color Fill . 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity.Velocity. 20 In the drawing area. select the color scheme legend. and on the Options Bar. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. select the WSHP. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals.

If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings.08 in-wg/100ft. Select the upper segment of main duct. Under Constraints. and select 16". Click OK. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. select Calculated Size Only. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. The ductwork and fittings are updated. Select Restrict Height. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . for Branch Sizing. select Friction. click Cancel. and drag it to the right. and enter . and then click to select it. Select Only. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. highlight a segment of the duct.

31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. Using this tool. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Use the information that displays (flow. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. pressure. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. and pressure loss. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. static pressure. 33 Move the cursor over the system components.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Training Files. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct.NOTE As you inspect a system. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. 35 Click Finish. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. also known as the critical path. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i.rvt.

2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. and click Draw Duct.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and select the WSHP. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.Design is highlighted.HVAC Plan . 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . indicating that it’s the active view. and click to specify the end of the main duct.

Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select 9' 10 1/2". The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. double-click MEP . NOTE When drawing duct. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . 11 On the Options Bar. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. Front. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. 14 In the Project Browser.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. for Offset. 15 On the ViewCube. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.3D MEP. and click Draw Duct. click the corner where the Top. select the top right diffuser. right-click the connector grip.

it is considered a closed loop. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. the color fill indicates the flow value. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. in space 115.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 22 Using the same method. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). The ductwork is automatically created. 19 In the drawing area. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. Also.

A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. 25 Press Esc. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. You can ignore the warning. and select the top left diffuser. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. zoom in to the open end of the main duct.

33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . and then click Modify. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 30 Press Esc twice. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. and click to select it.

such as a plenum. for Flow.Airflow. and click OK. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. under Mechanical . The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. clear Restrict Height. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select a segment of the main duct. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. and then click OK. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 40 Using the same method. under Constraints.

or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. In this lesson. 109 . You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. and a cooling tower located on the roof. including 2 base mounted pumps. Automatically and manually lay out piping. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. Create return and supply piping systems. Then. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. you place mechanical equipment. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. on level 3 of the building model. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.Left Return . verify that Wall faces is selected. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Design is highlighted. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.High Efficiency .Horizontal . in corridor 328. 7 On the Options Bar.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. and select WSHP . indicating that it’s the active view.2-6 Tons . as shown.

and click to place the dimension. as shown. and in the Type Selector. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.8 Click the corridor wall face. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. click the dimension. and enter 2'. as shown. click the top edge of the WSHP. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. 10 Select the WSHP. verify that the WSHP is still selected.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first.

for Water Flow. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. and click to place it in the mechanical room. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 12 GPM. Click OK. Under Mechanical. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.14 Click Modify. as shown. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. for Offset. select the 2 WSHPs. enter 9'.

Create pipes to physically connect the system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Create the logical connection between the system components. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. including flow and pressure. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you create the return and supply piping systems.21 Click Modify.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. click Training Files. right-click the Systems column heading. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. where it is easier to review the information. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . Unlike logical connections (systems). but without a corresponding system. Creating a Piping System | 115 . 5 In the System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. and click View ➤ Piping.Design is highlighted. You can create pipes to connect system components. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. analyses cannot be performed.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .HVAC Plan .Mech 330).

all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the boiler. Assigning a system component to an existing system. while pressing Ctrl. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system.In the System Browser. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. for System Name. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select the 2 WSHPs. This display indicates that the system is selected. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. 10 On the Options Bar. As you assign equipment to systems. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Notice that on the Options Bar. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. Therefore. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. and the Edit System tool is not active. 12 In the drawing area. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return.

15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. and select the cooling tower.Design ➤ Floor Plans. for System Name. double-click Roof . (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties.Design. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 In the Project Browser.13 Click Finish Editing System. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously.HVAC Plan . Creating a Piping System | 117 . 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. You have created the hydronic return system. under Design ➤ HVAC . and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. 17 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. and click Select. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The hydronic supply system highlights in red. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. 26 Click Finish Editing System. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. expand the Hydronic Return system category. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs.22 In the Select Connector dialog. and click Expand All. In heating mode. 29 Right-click CHWS. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. 28 Using the same method. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 23 Close the roof plan view. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. indicating the logical connection. 25 Select the boiler. In cooling mode. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). and bypasses the cooling tower. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category.

you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser.In the System Browser. and click Column Settings. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. under Mechanical. and click Properties. you can view several parameters. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. and click OK. enter 18 GPM. for Water Flow. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . You also manually modify the layout path as required. 32 In the System Browser. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. including the flow rate and size of the component. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. expand Piping. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. 31 In the Column Settings dialog.

and click OK. click Check None. 10 Click OK. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . press Tab to highlight the system. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan . Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. 5 In the Filter dialog. select CHWR.Mech 330). the boiler. and click to select it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors).Design is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner.HVAC plan view range are highlighted.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. 9 In the Select a System dialog. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. click Training Files. A system preview displays in red. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. then the Select a System dialog displays. Notice that all components within the Level 3 .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. When you draw a box to select components. you can place the cursor over a system component. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). select Mechanical Equipment. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan.

duct. structural beams. select Perimeter. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. enter 1' 6''. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. or architectural components. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. click Settings. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. 13 Click Cancel.11 On the Options Bar. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. For Inset. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. verify that Solutions is selected. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. It does not reference the architecture. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.

you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. the flow for one WSHP is 18. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and press Tab 3 times. and the flow for the other is 12. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. to display the path with thinner lines. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. 17 Optionally. 19 In the drawing area.16 Click Finish Layout. With each Tab.

and access its instance properties. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM).The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. and click OK. 23 Under Mechanical. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. under Mechanical. 22 Select the boiler. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 24 Press Esc. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. and click OK. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 .

29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 27 On the System Tools panel. 28 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Next. click Edit System. On the Options Bar. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. double-click Level 1 . you physically close the CHWR loop. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR).HVAC Plan .Design. which propagates flow throughout the system. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Logically. 32 Click Finish Editing System. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the Number of Elements is now 8. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below.

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Cancel. as shown. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. select a WSHP. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 38 Using the same method. 35 Using the drag control. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. access its instance properties.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below.

For Inset. and then click OK. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. Click Settings. enter 0''/12''. select Perimeter 1 of 5. enter 1' 6''. select CHWS. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. 41 Click OK. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . For Slope. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above.40 In the Select a System dialog.

and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 .The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. (Both sections are at the same elevation. as shown. as shown. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. 48 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. 46 Click Modify. 47 In the drawing area. In a later exercise.

You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. or offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved.50 Using the same method. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). Add piping to close the supply loop. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. To create the piping system. or manually modify the pipe. 51 Click Finish Layout. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Either relocate the system components. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system.

rvt. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. double-click 3D HVAC Building. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .HVAC Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. As you work in the training file. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.Design is highlighted. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and the return pipes are magenta.Design ➤ 3D Views. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . as shown. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

as shown.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 6 Press Delete. select the section of piping. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 7 In the plan view.

10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. ■ Click to move the piping. and press Esc to clear the selection. 9 In the 3D view. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. Click to specify the reference point. select the boiler. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 .8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.

14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. The connections are automatically created. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. 12 In the 3D view. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. select the boiler. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and click Draw Pipe. and the lower one is secondary. 13 In the plan view. and click OK. select the return pipe riser.

enter 2'. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. and press Enter. and you select 1 connector. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 .In a plan view. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. enter 1' . the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. for Offset.7''. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. ■ Move the cursor down. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.

19 In the plan view. as shown. and click OK. and the appropriate fittings are created. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. and select it. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 18 Press Esc twice. As you place piping runs that are close together. select the primary base mounted pump. 21 In the Select Connector dialog.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. 27 Move the cursor to the right. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. and when the connector point displays. and click the minus symbol. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and click to draw the pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. and click Draw Pipe. 28 Press Esc. right-click the bottom connector. you select the tee fitting. 29 If necessary. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. click to connect to the pump.

right-click the discharge connector. select the primary base mounted pump. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click to create the pipe. for Offset. 31 On the Options Bar. 33 Press Esc. enter 4'.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump.

3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. as shown. 35 Using the method learned previously. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. these pipe connections were created automatically.

■ Move the cursor down. type 1'. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the bottom control on the tee. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. for Offset. and click to create the pipe. enter 9' 6''. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. and press Enter. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

you validate the flow through the system. right-click. and click Element Properties. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view.37 Click Modify. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. You now have a closed loop system. Next. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 .

48 In the plan view.50 or 50% of the Flow. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . notice that Flow is 125 GPM. In the Instance Properties dialog. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. notice that under Mechanical. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 42 Click OK. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. Connect the cooling tower Next. select the cooling tower. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. and click Element Properties. view the properties for the secondary pump. for Cooling Water Flow. When you create the pumps in parallel. under Mechanical. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. right-click. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. The flow is being propagated through the piping. and click OK.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. 43 Press Esc. 40 Click Cancel. 41 Using the same method. the value is 0 GPM. 44 In the 3D view. under Mechanical. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). 46 Press Esc.

Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. 49 Press Esc.■ Lower pipe (outlet). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 .

51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 52 Close the file with or without saving it.50 In the 3D View. select the cooling tower. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. Adding Valves In this exercise. and is heated by the boiler. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode).rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. When the valve is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the water bypasses the cooling tower. and close the dialog.

The bypass valve is closed by default. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. and select Ball Valve .Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. 4 On the Options Bar.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 Press Esc twice. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. Adding Valves | 143 .

parallel to the previously placed valve. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 12 Select Ball Valve .2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 14 Using the same method. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .10 Press Esc. place another Ball Valve .2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.

(This valve allows the water to flow through it. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. In heating mode. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). verify that Flow is 0 GPM. Adding Valves | 145 .Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. and select Ball Valve .) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). and click OK. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. and select Ball Valve . validate that the Flow is 125 GPM.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click. and click Element Properties. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. 19 Using the same method. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. 20 Select the bypass valve. under Mechanical. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode.

Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. Sizing Pipe In this exercise.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. as shown. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping.22 Using the method you just learned. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM.rvt. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. indicating that it’s the active view. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. click Training Files. Initially. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Flow. click Pipe Color Fill . select Pipe Color Fill . and click OK. and click OK. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. for Schemes.Size. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Sizing Pipe | 147 . This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.

Click OK.25 FT/100ft.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). and enter 2. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click to select the branch. 13 Press Esc. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. Under Constraints. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. Select And. and for Velocity. for Branch Sizing. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. enter 5 FPS. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. select Friction. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.

or offset elevations are incorrect. pressure. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Using the System Inspector. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. select a different layout solution. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow.Design ➤ 3D Views.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.rvt. Inspecting the System In this exercise. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. or manually modify the pipe. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. Inspecting the System | 149 . Either relocate the system components. click Training Files.

flow. as required. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. An inspection flag reports the section number. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and pressure information including pressure loss. This information helps you modify the system design. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe.

for Fluid Temperature. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. inspect Section 6 again.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. 10 Click Finish. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . 11 Close the file with or without saving it. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. and to size pipe. as shown. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. select 90° F. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. targeting those systems that need attention. and click OK. 9 Using the same method. In this exercise. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open.67 psi. the Static Pressure is 7. and the Pressure Loss is 1.88 psi. you need to validate them.89 psi.

4 In the System Browser. the pipe is associated with that system. and click Show to view all of the system components. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. double-click Level 1 . 9 Right-click CHWS.Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. and for pipe sizing. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments.HVAC Plan . and click View. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems.Design. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems.rvt. As you learned when placing components. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. 6 In the Project Browser. In the System Browser. right-click the Systems titlebar. Warnings display. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). click Training Files. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. 7 In the System Browser. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. After you assign components to a system. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked.Design. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. and double-click Level 3 . the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. After you have assigned all components to systems. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. If you place components without assigning them to a system. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. thus assigning the components to a system. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. For example.HVAC Plan .

11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 14 Using the methods that you learned. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. and confirm unassigned system components.HVAC Plan . otherwise. 10 Using the same methods. right-click Hydronic Return. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 13 Right-click CHWR. expand the Unassigned folder. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. Checking Piping Systems | 153 .Design floor plan. and select Level 3 . The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. click Close. and click Expand All. 12 In the System Browser.TIP If you have multiple views open.

154 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 155 .

156 .

Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Define required lighting. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.

In this exercise you review electrical settings. ■ ■ For Factor. enter 1. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .04.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. wiring. select Copper.rvt. For Temperature. expand Wiring .Wire Sizes. For Material. click Training Files. For Temperature Rating. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. select Copper. As you place components and create circuits. Select Correction Factor. select Wiring Types. and demand factors that are applied in the design. ■ Click New Correction Factor. select 75. distribution systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. speeding up the design phase. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. ■ ■ For Material. enter THHN. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. click (Open). select 90. You also add a wiring type. Click OK.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Red. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. for Custom Colors. Click OK three times. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. Click Background Color.■ ■ For Value.

Then. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. as you place lighting fixtures. Create power loads. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. power circuits. Create a panel schedule. Use the System Browser to check your design. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. First. 167 .Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels.

rvt. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements.00 fc. click (Open). In the Color dialog. Click OK. select the color legend. 2 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. By using orange as the color for this range. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for the Spaces Category.00 fc. select Orange. Under Scheme Definition. select Average Estimated Illumination. select the color for Less Than 20. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Basic Colors. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend.Lighting Color Fill view is open. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. You can create additional color schemes. click Training Files. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK.

The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. which is the lowest value in the specified range. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area.277. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 .Lighting Ceiling plan. 8 In the Project Browser. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated.5 fc range.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. zoom to space Library 219. 13 Click the Level 2 . 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.5 fc range is satisfied. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. The red field will clear once the +/. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/.7 In the Project Browser. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 18 Click to place the fixture. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. select Multiple. the fixtures will move accordingly. 23 Click OK. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 25 On the Options Bar. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 20 Select the lighting fixture.

30 On the Options Bar. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 27 Press ESC to end the command.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 28 In the drawing area. select the 3 fixtures. select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.32 Press ESC. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 36 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. select Lighting Fixtures. and for Category. click Check None. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) .277V.

38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the changes for the space Library 219.The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

select Multiple Alignment. click the ceiling grid line as shown. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . 41 On the Options Bar. The lighting delta is satisfied. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. Note the changes for the space Library 219.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . 42 In the drawing area.277V.

The fixture aligns. 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .43 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

In the next exercise. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. click (Open). click Training Files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 46 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.45 Press ESC to end the command. you modify the light fixture IES files.

5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. scroll to view space space Library 219. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 2 Tile the views as shown.Lighting Color Fill plan. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser.Lighting Plan.

enter 162. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. enter F15. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads.277V and click OK. Under Photometrics. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. ■ Under Photometrics. Under Electrical. and click OK. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . select Luminous Flux. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. Under Photometrics.00 lm. Under Identity Data. select T5 [HO].85. specify 15000. enter . click the value for Initial Color. for Lamp. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. select 463T5_S. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog.00 VA. click the value for Initial Intensity. In the Select File dialog. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. for Color Preset.ies and click Open. ■ Click OK twice. for Apparent Load. Under Photometrics. ■ Click Apply.93. In the Name dialog. enter . select Xenon and click OK. for Ballast Loss Factor. Click OK. for Type Mark.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. click the value for Light Loss Factor. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule.

and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. select Lighting Fixtures. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .277V. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W .9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. and for Category. 10 In the Filter dialog. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. click Check None.

Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type.Press Delete. select the top center fixture. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . 15 In space Library 219. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Note the lighting delta updates again.

Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.

2 In the drawing area. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. and receptacles to your design. and Receptacles | 183 .Press Delete. junction boxes. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. you add switches. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Open). click Training Files. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. In the next exercise.

6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.277V. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor .Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 7 Click to place the switch. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.

NoLoad. 12 In the Load Family dialog. Placing Switches. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.rfa and click Open. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. Select Junction Boxes .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. and Receptacles | 185 . 9 Press ESC to end the command. Junction Boxes. The element type Junction Boxes . browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . Click OK twice. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. note the Number of Poles is 1.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 15 Select the junction box. Under Electrical. Click Edit Type. enter 9’0”. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 21 In the drawing area. In the Type Properties dialog. NOTE When entering values. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . zoom to space Library 219. enter JB-1NL. note that Apparent Load is set to 0.Offset. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. for Level 2 . Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser.14 Press ESC to end the command. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. for Mark.

and Receptacles | 187 . 24 For any column. Junction Boxes. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. and Number of Elements. 23 In the System Browser. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Distribution System.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and Voltage. Space Number. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. right-click and click Column Settings. Expand General. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. 26 In the System Browser. Select Load. Select Size. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Expand Electrical. Click OK. Placing Switches. NOTE If necessary. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Space Name.

28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 31 Close the System Browser. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown.

40 On the Options Bar. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. select Copy and Multiple. and Receptacles | 189 . 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 38 Select the receptacle.

190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. move the cursor along the wall. 42 Move the cursor down. and enter 12’ and press ENTER. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle.

and Receptacles | 191 . Placing Switches. Junction Boxes.43 Press ESC to end the command.

46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.

you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.48 Close the file with or without saving it.

click (Open). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. and work toward the higher voltage. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding wiring to a project is optional. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. click Training Files. 2 In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. zoom to the space Electrical 220. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP).rvt.equipment. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

select 120/208 Wye. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Loads. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . for Distribution System. select 480/277 Wye. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 15 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the panelboard. 7 Press ESC to end the command. enter 20. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 8 Select the panelboard. for Max. enter PP-2B.Surface: 100A.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 9 On the Options Bar. Click OK. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. #1 Pole Breakers. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. for Distribution System. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . For Panel Name.

17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. zoom to space Instruction 221. Click OK. Click OK. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. for Max. enter 20. #1 Pole Breakers. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. enter LP-2B. 20 In the drawing area. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. which is the logical connection between the elements. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. For Panel Name. and for Category. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. click Check None.Loads. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 23 In the Filter dialog. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .

30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 32 Press ESC. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Select the switch on the right.28 Press ESC to end the command.

36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 35 Select the left three-way switch.

44 Close the file with or without saving it. for Hot Conductors. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. select Wires. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . click Check None.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 41 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. 38 Press ESC to end the command. and for Category. except without wire. Click OK. enter 2. click (Open). Next you create circuits without showing wire. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits.Loads. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

and then expand circuit 1. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Distribution System.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the drawing area. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. Voltage. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. Click OK. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor.rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. ■ 16 In the System Browser. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 13 In the System Browser. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . click Training Files. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. expand Power. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. Rating. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. right-click on the Systems heading. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Expand Electrical. and verify that Load. and Voltage Drop are selected. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical.

21 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 30 Close the System Browser. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Click OK. change the Voltage to 277V. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 22 With the junction box still selected. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. under Electrical.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it.

Click OK. click below the first one to place it. click Edit Type. enter FR4. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. Click Tags.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. under Identity Data. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 47 In the drawing area. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 40 Click OK twice. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click Yes. for Type Mark.

Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. select Lighting Fixture Tags. 52 In the Save As dialog. select Break. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. For Circuit Number. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Click Save. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Click OK. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. Click OK. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 56 In the Filter dialog. and click Apply. click Check None. and for Category. Next you create a switch system. Click OK. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Deselect Break and for Suffix. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area.rfa. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. enter a comma. for File Name. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left.

3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 2 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Click OK. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. click Training Files. under Electrical Lighting. enter a. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system.rvt. for Switch ID. click (Open). 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Select the occupancy sensor.

for switch ID. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK.Lighting. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. under Electrical . 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. enter b. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.

5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. select the PP-2B panel. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. Next you create a circuit and size wire. Click OK. 2 In the drawing area.26 Close the file with or without saving it. 7 In space Electrical 220. lighting. Circuits are used for power. 4 In the Filter dialog.rvt. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Training Files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. select Electrical Fixtures. click (Open). Creating Power Loads | 207 . and data systems. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. click Check None. and for Category. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

and in the right pane. 13 Select the wire again.rfa. and click Open. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. 19 Click OK.Loads. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. select Long Wire Tick Mark. for Hot Conductors. Click OK. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. select Wiring. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. under Electrical . 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 15 In the Load Family dialog. and in the drawing area. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. enter 2. and click Element Properties. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark.

as shown. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. and click to select the circuit. 22 In space Electrical 220.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. Creating Power Loads | 209 . select the PP-2B panel. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222.

and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. 29 In space Instruction 221. click the connector of the first receptacle. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 28 In the drawing area. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns.26 Press Delete. as shown. in space Instruction 221. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221.

click Open. zoom to space Electrical 220. 2 In the drawing area. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. click Training Files. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. select panel LP-2B. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. 3 In the Electrical space. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Next you balance the loads for your design. In the left pane of the Open dialog.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222.rvt. Finally. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

1-#10.3712 VA. Under Electrical-Loads. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 1-#12. click Rebalance Loads. B. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Notice that the loads on Phase A.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. 14 Close the warning dialog. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 6 Click OK.3616 VA). and Phase C . 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Scroll down. Click OK. for Rating. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 1-#12. Phase B 3636 VA. 12 Select panel PP-2B. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 1-#10. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. enter 30A.

Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. enter 25A. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. under Electrical . Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. Click OK. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. enter 30A. click (Open). for Rating. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. Select PP-2B. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. under Electrical . 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Next you create a panel schedule. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. and click OK. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . and click OK. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1.15 Select panel PP-2B. click Training Files. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.Loads. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load.Loads. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. for Rating. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected.rvt. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Close the warning dialog.

The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. for Font. Under Body Text. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. under Other.rvt. 6 In the Project Browser. enter 3/32. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. enter 1/8. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. for Font Size. select Bold and Italic.Panel Schedules. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). click Edit. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. 5 In the Project Browser. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. Under Header Text. and open E601 . for Font Size. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 11 Click OK twice. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. for Appearance. select Berlin Sans FB. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 12 Close the file with or without saving it. 7 Select the schedule. expand Sheets (all). Under Header Text. 4 Close the report. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog.

7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. press TAB once. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. In the System Browser. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. Expand Unassigned. In the System Browser. select space Lounge 212. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. each with a load of 180VA. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. Checking Your Design | 215 . Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212.

Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 20 On the Options Bar. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. zoom to space Electrical 214. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 16 Close the details dialog. select MDP-1. 18 Select panel LP-2C. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. for Panel. under Warnings. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 15 In the dialog. 17 In the drawing area.

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. 2 In the Project Browser. Adding a pipe size. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. you create a PVC pipe type. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .rvt.Plumbing Plan . In this exercise. type PVC . 219 . and click OK.Sanitary. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and verify that Level 1 . You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. and click Properties. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.Vent. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. click Training Files.Design is open. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. 4 In the Name dialog. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. planning is critical to a successful design. right-click PVC . In this lesson.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. in addition to loading existing families. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate.

select Tee Reducing Double Vent . and open Imperial\Families\Trap P .rfa.DWV: Standard.DWV: Standard. refer to Revit MEP Online Help.5 In the Type Properties dialog. under Pipe Types. enter -4' . for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 26 Click OK. In the Project Browser. Tee. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. Cross. 17 In the left pane. click Modify. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. click Training Files.PVC . under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 22 Click New Size. PVC .Sch 40 . enter 27/32''. For Offset. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. select None. and click OK. select Sanitary. enter 10°. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. enter 1/2''. for Material.Sch 40 . 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . 6 Click OK. click Pipe Settings. enter 5/8''. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. for Nominal. 10 On the Selection panel. select Tee Vent .PVC . select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary.Sch 40 . select Branch. Tap. 24 For Inside Diameter. select Plastic. 15 For System Type. 21 In the right pane. under Mechanical. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings.0''. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings.PVC . 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 13 In the right panel.Vent is listed. select Sanitary. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. 18 For System Type. select Tee. 25 For Outside. and click Main.DWV. 27 For the new pipe size. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.

Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. add a hot water heater. including plumbing fixtures. Create the cold water system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. Create the hot water system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. vent. sanitary piping. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. 221 . and hot and cold water piping.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans. including the men’s room (space Male 107). move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. NOTE To identify a space name and number. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. and verify that Level 1 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you add 2 toilets. as shown. click Training Files. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.Design is open. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room.rvt. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. 1 urinal.Plumbing Plan .

select Public . under Water Closet .Wall Mounted.Flush Valve . Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . 1 wall-mounted urinal. and 3 sinks. 4 On the Element panel. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. against the left wall.6 gpf. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. as shown. 5 On the Placement panel. in the Type Selector.1. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . zoom in closer.7 Click to place another toilet.) 8 Press Esc. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. use the reference line to center the fixture. under Urinal .Wall Hung. and press Esc. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. (Again. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. above the first in the standard toilet space.

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. 14 Click Modify.Rectangular. In placing the fixture. under Floor Drain . 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. select 5''x5'' Strainer .2'' Drain. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . click Place on Face. 12 On the Placement panel.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder.rvt. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. and click View ➤ Piping. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. and review the components listed under this system. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). click Training Files. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. In this exercise. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and Default Domestic Cold Water. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. right-click in the System Browser table heading. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and a floor drain. 17 If all disciplines are displayed.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. a urinal. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . clear Lines (<Overhead>). Only plumbing fixtures are selected. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views.Plumbing Plan . and click OK. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design is open. 8 In the Filter dialog. 6 In the plan view. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and verify that Level 1 . Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . 2 In the Project Browser. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. so the Create Sanitary System is available. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. for System Name. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 11 On the Options Bar. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. enter Sanitary 107. 12 On the Edit System panel. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. If you deselected the drain. expand Sanitary. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors.

and click OK. select one of the components in the system. as shown. select Sanitary 107. for example. A preview of the piping layout displays. The base is placed. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 16 In the Select a System dialog. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. a toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 .Create physical connections 14 In the plan view.

for Slope. enter 1/8'' / 12''. enter -4'-0”. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. 26 On the Options Bar. select Intersections. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. 27 Click Modify. You accept this suggested solution. for Diameter. 21 On Options Bar. and modify it to meet project requirements. enter -1' 0''. 25 On the Options Bar. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. The default settings are automatically modified. for Solution Type. select Main. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. click Solutions. and click OK. enter -1' 0''. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. for Offset. select 4''. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements.19 On the Options Bar. and for Offset. select Branch. and click Settings. 24 In the left pane. 23 For Offset. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected.

and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. select the vertical route path segments.Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .

232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .30 In the 3D view. 31 Click Modify. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown. as shown. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.

Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .33 Using the previous method. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. click Finish Layout. 34 On the Generate Layout panel.

and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. When a fitting is reversed. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. select the fitting and click to reorient it. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.

adding sinks in the men’s room. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 .37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. you continue with the work from the last exercise. as shown. and check the slope control. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise.

Design ➤ Floor Plans.Public.Rectangular. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is open.rvt. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Plan . select 22''x22'' . 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . under Lavatory . click Training Files. 5 On the Placement panel. 4 On the Element panel. and verify that Level 1 . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . in the Type Selector.

7 Click Modify. On the Options Bar. and press Enter to create a second sink. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. TIP When entering dimensions. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. enter 2' 4''. For example. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. select Multiple. 8 Select the sink. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 .

■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 12 In the drawing area. click Finish Editing System. 16 On the Edit System panel. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 11 In the System Browser. and press Enter to create the third sink. Press Esc. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. click Add To System. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 15 Click the 3 sinks.

as shown. under Design ➤ Plumbing . Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). use the ViewCube to orient the view. 22 In the plan view. 19 In the 3D view. double-click 3D Plumbing. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 20 Select the fitting. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. with the tee fitting selected. 21 Select the tee. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. and click Draw Pipe.In the System Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal.

26 On the Options Bar. for Offset. In this example. enter 2' . and click to draw the pipe. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. for Slope. press Spacebar. 24 On the Options Bar.6''.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. enter 1/8'' / 12''. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. 27 Click Modify. and click Apply. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . When you press the Spacebar.

PVC . 31 Click Modify. under Wye 45 Deg Double .DWV. 29 In the Type Selector. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.Sch 40 . 30 In the 3D view. 32 Select the double wye fitting.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and when the vertical center line displays. click to place the fitting. move the cursor over the stub pipe. select Standard. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 .

you add pipe segments to the double wye. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. and press Enter. enter 6''. and click Draw Pipe. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. on the Options Bar. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. enter 1'. right-click the right connector. double-click the section head to open the section view. 36 In the section view. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 34 Press Esc. In the next steps. for Offset. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Enter. 37 Select the fitting.33 With the fitting selected.

43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 41 Using the same method. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. as shown. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). and click to place the pipe. 42 Click Modify. 40 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 .Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool.

right-click the bottom connector. and press Esc. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 47 Move the cursor down. enter 6''. and click Draw Pipe. press Spacebar. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 49 Using the same method. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 46 In the section view. 48 Click Modify. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks.

52 In the plan view. under Trap P . place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.PVC .Sch 40 . rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. select Standard. 56 Using the same method. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. select the P-Trap on the left. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 51 In the Type Selector.DWV. 55 In the 3D view. 54 Click Modify. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . 53 Using the same method.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.

select the left P-Trap. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Draw Pipe. Click Modify. connect the right sink to the double wye. In the plan view. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Move the cursor to the left. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. enter 6''. Select the double wye pipe on the left. 58 Using the same method. Click in the plan view. and press Enter..

and select a proposed solution. Press Esc. under Pipe Types. select PVC Sanitary. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. On the Routing Solutions panel. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . select the section of pipe you just drew.■ In the 3D view. as shown. while pressing Ctrl. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. while pressing Ctrl. click Finish to select the recommended solution. In the Type Selector.

verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. adjusting the sanitary stack. click Finish. click Training Files.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 62 On the Options Bar. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. and verify the slope. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. for Slope.

3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. as shown. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. right-click the top connector. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . select Standard.Design. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . select the elbow fitting on the right.Overall. and click the intersection to place the fitting. 7 On the Selection panel.Plumbing Plan . and click Draw Pipe.Sch 40 .Design. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38.Floor level line. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .DWV. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . click Modify. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.PVC . 3 In the Section view. 10 In the 3D view. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. select the vertical stack. and click to draw the pipe. 9 In the Type Selector. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 5 Select the tee.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing.

as shown. under Plug . 14 On the Options Bar. for Offset. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. select Standard.PVC .DWV. 13 Click the rotate control once. 17 In the Type Selector. 15 Press Esc. 12 Select the fitting.11 Click Modify. 18 In the plan view.Sch 40 . enter 1'-0”.

click Training Files.rvt. and verify that Level 1 . Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.Design is open. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout.Plumbing Plan . Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i.19 Click Modify.

6 In the left pane. click Check None. and sinks. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Domestic Hot Water. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 9 In the left pane. for System Type. if necessary. select Main.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. select Pipe Types: Water. 7 In the left pane. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. enter 9' 3''. select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. minimize the Sanitary system.Design ➤ 3D Views. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. expand Unassigned. and click Main. For Offset. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. 14 In the System Browser. 15 In the plan view.Overall. and for System Type. select Branch. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. urinal. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. select Branch. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 4 In the right pane. select Plumbing Fixtures. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. draw a selection box to select the toilets. and click OK. 17 In the Filter dialog. For Offset. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. double-click 3D Plumbing . under Design ➤ Plumbing . and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Pipe Types: Water.) 10 Click OK. verify that the value is 9' 0''. select Domestic Hot Water. for System Type.

Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. 21 On the Edit System panel. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. 19 On the System Tools panel.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. click Edit System. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. In the System Browser. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. click Finish Editing System. Notice that the water main displays in blue.

press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. under Pipe Types. as shown. click to the left of the urinal. and click the connector. select Water. enter 10'. and press Enter. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. For Offset. 35 In the Type Selector. 37 On the Options Bar. 33 Click Modify. enter 4'0”. enter 0”/12”.2 7/8''.25 Using the same method. at the intersection of the water main pipe. 34 In the plan view. for Offset. For Slope. select 3/4''. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. right-click the top DCW connector. and click Draw Pipe. and click to place the pipe. 36 Move the cursor to the left. for Offset. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. select the sink above the urinal. 30 In the plan view. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 32 Move the cursor to the right. 31 On the Options Bar. connect the second toilet. enter 3' . enter 7''. as shown. 28 In the Type Selector. and press Enter.

43 Click the branch cold water pipe. 41 Select the top sink. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . and click OK. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. 40 Click Modify. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.39 Move the cursor to the left. and click to connect to the main cold water line. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. add a water heater. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .44 Using the same method. you create the hot water system.

and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. expand the Unassigned folder. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing .Design is open.Plumbing Plan .Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. select the 3 sinks. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt. click Training Files. and verify that Level 1 . Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. while pressing Ctrl. 6 In the plan view. 2 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Creating the Hot Water System | 257 .

8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room.Tankless. in the Unassigned folder. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. you edit the system to add equipment. verify that DCW 107 is selected. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems. 10 In the System Browser. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. Default Domestic Hot Water. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. 13 In the plan view.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. select 0. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and click OK. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. 12 In the Type Selector. In later steps. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Edit System. under Water Heater . for System Name. Default Domestic Cold Water. 14 Click Modify. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders.6 Gallon. 15 In the System Browser. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first.

Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. 26 Move the cursor to the right. as shown. 24 Move the cursor up. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . select the water heater. right-click the middle left connector. for Offset.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 25 On the Options Bar. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. 27 Click Modify. 19 Select the water heater. 22 In the Type Selector. and select Draw Pipe. click Finish Editing System. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. and press Enter. Slope: 0''/12''. enter 1' 6''. 23 On the Options Bar. and on the Edit System panel. enter 10’. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. Offset: 4' 6''. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. and click the water main line.

Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. and in the System Selector. 37 On the Options Bar. 38 Move the cursor to the right. 33 On the Edit System panel. select a sink. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. click Finish Editing System. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. as shown. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. for Diameter. enter 1' 6''.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. and press Enter. select 4'-6''. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). and click Draw Pipe. enter 9' 0''. and for Offset. enter 1''. select Domestic Hot Water 107. 30 On the System Tools panel. for Offset. click Edit System. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 36 Move the cursor down. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. 35 On the Options Bar. and on the Placement Tools panel.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . enter 2' 8''.39 Move the cursor down. enter 1’. and click just above the bottom sink. 40 On the Options Bar. 41 Move the cursor down. 42 Click Modify. as shown. and press Enter. for Offset.

44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool.43 In the 3D view.

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.

264 .

265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. and click Duplicate. However. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. After finishing each exercise. 267 . To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. In this tutorial. go to http://www. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. If the tutorial training files are not present. click Training Files. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. You create a new pipe type. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model.rvt.autodesk. In this lesson. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. you can choose to save your work. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Right-click Standard.

and then click OK. In this exercise. duct. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. However. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. In the left pane. under Mechanical. structural beams. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. For Pipe Type. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. For Offset. For Offset. select Fire Protection Wet. Next. verify that 9' 0" is selected. you create project parameters and work with schedules. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. or architectural components. For System Type. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. you modify the type properties of the pipe. select Main. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. and enter Fire Protection Wet. click Rename. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. For System Type. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. select Fire Protection Wet. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. select Carbon Steel. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. verify that 9' 0" is specified. In the next exercise. For Pipe Type. 9 Click OK. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. for Material. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties.

Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . 8 Using a crossing window. right-click. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. select Fire Protection. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog.Design is highlighted. for Sprinkler Zone. 6 In the drawing area. Under Categories. 5 Click OK twice. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Name. and click Element Properties. For Group parameter under.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. enter Sprinkler Zone.Fire Protection Plan . click Add. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose.rvt. select space Instruction 221 as shown. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. select the upper half of the building. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. select Spaces. the space crossing lines display. enter Zone 1. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Fire Protection. and then click OK.

verify that only Spaces are selected. select Zone 1.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and then click OK. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. under Fire Protection. enter Zone 2. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. to which you add various parameters. including a calculated value parameter. 10 In the Filter dialog. under Fire Protection.rvt. 13 Using the same method. and then access instance properties. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click OK. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. you create schedules for sprinkler design. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. for Sprinkler Zone. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Sprinkler Zone.

10 In the Format dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Obstructed-Combustible. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. select Spaces. In the Maximum Spacing column. Click OK. select Maximum Spacing. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. select Length. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 7 Click OK. 14 Select the new header. indicating that it’s the active view. select Fire Protection. 11 Click OK twice.Fire Protection Plan . enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. click the Formatting tab. For Rounding. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . enter Protection Area Construction Type. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Design is highlighted. and click Field Format. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Type of Parameter. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. enter 15. For Units. select To the nearest 1'. Click OK. Select Schedule keys. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. and on the ribbon. double-click on each column separator. for Name. For Group parameter under. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. click Add Parameter. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. For Name. 6 Using the same method.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . enter Maximum Spacing. For Key name. select Feet and fractional inches. The schedule displays. enter Light. 9 On the Formatting tab. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule.

Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. select Spaces. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Obstructed-Combustible Extra. For Name. Click OK. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. under Available fields. and press Enter. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. 16 Using the same method. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Unobstructed Extra. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. enter Sprinkler Schedule.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Unobstructed Ordinary. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. enter 130.

For Then by. select Sprinkler Zone. select Number. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. click Edit. select Common. Enter the formula operator / after Area. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). select Area. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . The Sprinkler Schedule displays. For Units. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. select 0 decimal place. for Sort by. select Level. Select Header and Blank line.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. select Fixed. under Other. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. click . In the Fields dialog. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Rounding. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. select Minimum Sprinklers. For Formula. and click Field Format. 20 On the Formatting tab. For Discipline. for Sorting/Grouping. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. 19 Click the Formatting tab. For Type. enter Minimum Sprinklers. 22 Click OK twice. and click OK. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click View Properties. Click OK.

29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. ■ In the Format dialog. 30 Click OK twice. select Level equals Level 2. For Then by (second instance). click Edit. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. and select Totals only. and then click Field Format. select Hidden field.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. For Fields. For Fields. select Level. 27 In the drawing area. 26 Click OK 3 times. Under Field formatting. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Number. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. select Minimum Sprinklers. and click View Properties. for Filter. select Sprinkler Zone. for Filter by. verify that Use default settings is selected. select Grand totals. and then select Hidden field. At the bottom of the dialog. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. right-click the schedule.

System Name. delete the word Maximum. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. for Embedded Schedule. On the Formatting tab. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Grand totals. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. Under Field formatting. and select Totals only. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. under Other. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. for Fields. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. and Count.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. double-click Type. click Edit. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. select Sprinklers. For Category. and click View Properties. select Count. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. for Available fields. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. select Embedded Schedule. select Calculate totals. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.

and the spacing parameter values are evident. select space 221 Instruction. select space 221 Instruction. select Light. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. Unobstructed. double-click FP . for Protection Area Construction Type. Unobstructed. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. under Identity Data. 48 In the floor plan. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 52 Click OK. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. under Identity Data. 41 In the plan view. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. under Identity Data. 50 Access the instance properties. As a result. but their values are not determined. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and access the instance properties. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 46 With the space still selected. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. Unobstructed. select Ordinary. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . for Protection Area Construction Type.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the schedule. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog.Fire Protection Plan Design. select Ordinary. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. and click OK. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 43 Click Cancel.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. methodology. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. However.autodesk. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. go to http://www. At the end of this tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. As you create the system.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you will understand the process. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. 279 . you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. After finishing each exercise. you can choose to save your work. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. As you place the sprinklers. and double-click Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.rvt.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. By following the recommended workflow. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. If the tutorial training files are not present. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. click Training Files.

3 In the Project Browser. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. When this happens. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. After placing the initial sprinkler. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. When there is a small misalignment. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally.

8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. 9 In space Instruction 202. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . and click to place 3 sprinklers. select the sprinklers that you placed. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Sprinkler . place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. 10 Press Esc twice. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers.Pendent . Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. 11 In the drawing area.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. while pressing Ctrl. as shown. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202.

you place non-hosted sprinklers. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Next. verify that Constrain is cleared. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and that Copy and Multiple are selected.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. Also.

25 Click OK.Fire Protection Plan . Adding Sprinklers | 283 . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 200B. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown.Design. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. under Constraints. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. open Design ➤ FP . move the cursor to the right. This number is determined in the schedule. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". you adjust the offset. for Offset. 17 In the Project Browser. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. enter 11. and press Enter. For Number. enter 14' 6". Notice that the schedule updates. Next. 19 In the floor plan. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array.FP_Ceiling view. specify a vertical offset. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. and 200C). enter 10' 6". and click Element Properties. 29 Press Esc.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . 18 Type WT. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. 22 In the 200A Corridor space.

IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. Unlike logical connections (systems). 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and then creating the logical connection between these system components. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers.30 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). After creating the logical connection. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. In the next exercise. In this exercise. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design is highlighted. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. and with piping (physical connection). piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.Fire Protection Plan . However. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Creating a Piping System In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure.

and assign the selected sprinklers to it. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. Creating a Piping System | 285 . all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. As you assign sprinklers to systems. 5 Right-click the header. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. In the System Browser. as shown. click View ➤ Systems. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. within the Piping Systems folder. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. and select Piping. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. named Fire Protection Wet. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system.

Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. for System Name. indicating the logical connection. and click Select. and a piping layout preview displays. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. 11 With the system still selected. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. Next. and on the Options Bar. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. For Offset. The Generate Layout tools are activated. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. 15 In the drawing area. press Tab. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 12 On the Options Bar. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. enter FP Wet_Zone2. select Branch. verify that 9' 0" is specified. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. verify that Main is selected. and select the system. 13 In the System Browser. select an initial piping layout. and number of elements in the system. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. place the cursor over a sprinkler. For Pipe Type. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. system equipment. click Settings.Wet is selected. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 14 Click Finish Editing System. In the left pane. providing system editing tools. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. 19 Click OK. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. The Edit Piping System panel displays. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers.

20 On the Generate Layout panel. click Place Base. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. and green represents branch lines). as shown. 23 For Offset. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . and select solution 5. 22 On the Options Bar. When the layout is finished. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. In general. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. for Diameter. select 2". these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). enter -12' 0". click Solutions. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. verify that Network is selected.

click Modify. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. 29 Click Finish Layout. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. On the Generate Layout panel. as shown.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. A (parallel movement control) displays.

IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. and then you create piping to physically connect them. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. or that offset elevations are incorrect. and various manual pipe creation tools. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . the Connect Into tool. Next. 32 If necessary. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . or manually modify the pipe. Either relocate the system components.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. select a different layout solution. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. 2 Zoom in. and select the elbow fitting as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 3 If necessary.Fire Protection Plan . 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee.

You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. 5 In the drawing area. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. for Solution Type. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. air terminals. click Finish Editing System. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. 12 On the Options Bar. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. verify that Solutions is selected. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. and pipe or duct is created. verify that Network is selected. 8 In the corridor. or a system component to display system tools. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). radiators. and select solution 5. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 9 On the Edit System panel. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. mechanical equipment. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 14 Close the System Browser. 13 Click Finish Layout. and so on) are logically connected by a system. click Add To System. you can select the pipe or duct. 18 Click Finish Editing System.

zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. and then press Esc. 21 In the Piping Plan. for Offset. 29 Using the same method. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. and then tile the views. select 9'. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. and click Draw Pipe. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 In the Piping Plan. 23 View the result in the 3D view. right-click. 25 Select the sprinkler.20 Open Design ➤ FP . 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 On the Options Bar. 28 In the drawing area.

zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 31 In the plan view. Because the whole system highlights. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 .

3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. 4 On the Options Bar. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. double-click on the section head to open the section view. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. ■ 6 Press Esc. for Scale. click Training Files. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .rvt. select 1/4" = 1'-0".Fire Protection Plan .

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for Diameter. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. select 4".21 On the Options Bar.

select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). The pipe diameter is modified. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. as shown. 24 In the drawing area. for Diameter.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. and then tag the piping as shown. 26 Using the same method. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . select 1 1/4". 25 On the Options Bar. and maximize the floor plan. 23 Close the 3D view.

use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. You added tags to pipes. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. In this exercise. For additional practice. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. In this tutorial. you created a wet fire protection system. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. 28 Close the file with or without saving it.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial.

add annotations and dimensions. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. 305 . create details.

306 .

matchlines. right-click Level 1. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. If the view included detail graphics. under Floor Plans. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. 3 In the Rename View dialog.rvt. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. and apply a view template. and click Rename. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. 307 . 2 In the Project Browser. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. and view references.Design ➤ Floor Plans. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . dependent views. and click Properties. right-click Copy of Level 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click OK.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. create dependent views for areas B and C. 6 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. as shown. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. views and put them on the sheet. and then press Esc. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. more focused. 4 Using the same method. 9 Click OK. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Rename. 10 In the drawing area.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Apply Default View Template. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and click OK. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels.rvt. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Training Files. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. and click OK.

21 Using the same method. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. In the Color dialog. 19 In the drawing area. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. for Target view. For Line Pattern. select Double Dash 5/8". click the current value. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . and then press Esc. select black./ ---). 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Click OK. on the Options Bar. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. 13 Press Esc twice.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. 14 Click Finish Matchline. and click OK. 20 Select the upper view reference and. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. select 11. For Line Weight.

Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 27 Using the same method. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . as shown.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and zoom to each of the view references. 25 Using the same method. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view.

under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views.rvt. right-click Plumbing Isometric . you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. Under Graphics.29 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. 4 In the Project Browser. enter Plumbing Isometric . The section crop lines no longer display. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. Click OK.Domestic Water. select Documentation. right-click 3D Plumbing. and select the section box. for View Name. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. for View Classification. and click to select it. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Apply Default View Template. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. 2 Zoom in. and click Properties. select Plumbing Isometric. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.Domestic Water. click Training Files. For Sub-Discipline. 6 In the Project Browser. select Plumbing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. For Default View Template. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.

select 3. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". select Dash. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. press Tab 3 times. and then click OK. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. For Pattern. Click Apply.9 Right-click. and click to select it. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 12 Using the same method.

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. 14 Right-click. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. and click to select it. as shown).

press Tab 3 times. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . 17 Label the fixtures as shown. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. Right-click. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. 18 Using methods learned previously. and click to select it.Sanitary Waste. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. On the View Control Bar.15 Press Esc. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric .Domestic Water view with detailing. click Reveal Hidden Elements. On the View Control Bar. In the drawing area. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

select To the nearest 1/8". Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 21 Click OK twice. as shown. 25 Press Esc twice. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. In the Format dialog. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. you use a plan view to create a callout view.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. Creating Callout Views | 315 . and click to place the spot slope annotation. and then place the callout view on a sheet. For Slope. for Rounding. verify that Common is selected. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. When the view is associated with a sheet. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. click on the Format value.

indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. select 1/4"=1'-0''. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Scale. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 5 On the Options Bar. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). click Training Files. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary.rvt. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser.

and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Creating Callout Views | 317 . ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. using the same method. for Line Weight. double-click M601 . drag it to the sheet.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. select 5. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. 13 In the Project Browser. Click OK.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. under Sheets (all).

for View Name.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. and click Apply Default View Template. For Title on Sheet. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Default View Template. enter WSHP PART PLAN. and select the viewport. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. Click OK. 17 In the Project Browser. right-click the callout view. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.

20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. Creating Callout Views | 319 .Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

and click OK. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. right-click the detail view. and click OK. and click Rename. enter Typical WSHP Detail. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 26 In the Rename View dialog. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. under Names. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail).21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 25 In the Project Browser. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. and click Apply View Template. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail.

you learn how to: ■ add text notes. ■ work with model-based components. and annotation to create a legend. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. duct tags.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. linetypes. 321 . symbols. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan.

under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i.rvt. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .Creating Annotations In this exercise. 8 With the text still selected. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. click Training Files. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS.

and a segment of rectangular duct. as shown. verify that Leader is cleared.9 Press Esc twice. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. select a supply diffuser. Creating Annotations | 323 . 15 On the Options Bar. a return diffuser. 16 In the drawing area. a segment of round duct. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and then click Right Straight.

clear Leader.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. 17 Click Modify. 21 In the Load Family dialog. 24 On the Options Bar.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. 22 In the Tags dialog. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog. under Category. tag the remaining diffusers in the area.rfa. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. and click Open. and click OK. for Ducts. click Load. If necessary.

and then press Esc. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 In the drawing area. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. as shown. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. and Attached End. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.25 In the drawing area. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. 26 On the Options Bar. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. select Horizontal. Leader. Creating Annotations | 325 . specify Tag Orientation as Vertical.

click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. as shown. for Leader. select Free End. 34 In the drawing area.33 On the Options Bar.

Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. not simply an instance property. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. select Dot Open 1/16". 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and lock lighting fixtures. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 37 In the drawing area. and click OK. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 40 Using the method learned previously. select the last tag placed. and all elements of that type are affected. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. you use temporary dimensions to locate. Creating Dimensions | 327 . tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown.36 Press Esc twice. for Leader Arrowhead. lay out. That’s because you changed a type property.

notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. click Training Files. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. 12 Press Esc. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan.rvt. select the dimension line. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. and then select the interior face of the wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . indicating that it’s the active view. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted.

and notes. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. click the 3 interior locks on the line. and offset them 8' from the wall. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 16 Press Esc. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . Creating a Legend | 329 . linework. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. enter 8'. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. annotation symbols. Creating a Legend In this exercise. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures.3 1/2"). Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. and press Enter. 19 Using the same methods. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line.13 Using the same method. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Because the dimensions are locked.

5 Click in the drawing area. enter Diffuser Legend. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. For View. 10 Using the same method. select Floor Plan. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . ■ 9 In the drawing area.rvt. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click below the title to place the diffuser. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. click Training Files. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .8 Neck. For Scale. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select 1/4" = 1' -0". Click OK.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.

14 In the drawing area. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.11 Press Esc. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. click next to the top diffuser. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. Creating a Legend | 331 .

29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror.DROP and its text note. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .RISE symbol for the copy start point. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE .DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 27 While pressing Ctrl. and then press Esc. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . The selected detail lines are now thin. 26 Press Esc. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 24 Select the component’s break line. 21 Press Esc.

31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Creating a Legend | 333 . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. and then click Modify. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. enter E. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 34 Using the method learned previously.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify.30 Select Spot Elevation . in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 35 Change the text on the right to N.MECHANICAL LEGEND.

334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 40 Press Esc. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.39 With the viewport still selected.

Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. 335 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view.113 East elevation view. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. A drafting view using detail components. detail groups. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail.Detailing 15 In this lesson. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. and text.rvt. click Training Files. A detail callout that references another view.

336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select each of the 2 panelboards. clear Leader. 7 Drag the Power Riser . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. place Power Riser .113 East on the sheet. Next. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. and then modify and align the views. 5 In the drawing area. 8 Using the same method.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .

and click OK. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram.9 Press Esc. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. right-click. 13 Right-click. under Identity Data. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. for Title on Sheet. and click Deactivate View. giving the appearance of a single view. and click Activate View. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. 12 Select the Level 1 line. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . select the 113 North view. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view.

23 Close the file with or without saving it. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. right-click.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. right-click. 19 Select the Level 1 line. you add wiring to the diagram. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. select the 113 East elevation view. as shown. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. and click Activate View. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. In the next exercise. 21 Using the drag control. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 22 Press Esc.

6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. select 6. enter Electrical Power. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 .Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. as shown. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel.rvt.113 North view. and then click OK. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. Under Modify Subcategories. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. 2 Close the Project Browser. expand Lines. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . notice that there are no snaps active. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . click Training Files. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. for Name. verify that Chain is selected. 9 Beginning at the transformer. click New. for Line Weight. In the left pane of the Open dialog. As you draw. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. In the New Subcategory dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. 8 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. In the Line Styles dialog.

11 Using the same method.10 Press Esc. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Offset. enter 1/8". 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. as shown.

18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. so that the result is as shown. TIP When you use the Trim tool. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . you select the portion of the line that you want to keep.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line.

21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown.

23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. as shown. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 29 Click Modify. 28 Click above the cap.

33 On the Options Bar. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.31 While pressing Ctrl. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. select Multiple. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

36 Press Esc. for Offset. enter 3/32". You enter exact values for each line length. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 39 Move the cursor to the right. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.5. and press Enter. and then press Esc. 42 On the Options Bar. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 40 Press Esc. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. enter 0 0.

346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 47 In the drawing area. select all 3 lines. and press Enter. while pressing Ctrl. click on the length dimension value. expand Groups ➤ Detail. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. and click OK. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. enter Ground. 46 In the Project Browser. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 50 With the group selected. Press Esc. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog.25. enter 0 0. and then press Esc. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. for Name.125. you can ensure that they stay together. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. Using the same method.

53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . TP-2B. 52 Select the detail group. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B.51 Using the method learned previously. 54 Select the group. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Zoom in to view the section. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. 2 Right-click the copy. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. for Name. and click Rename. click Training Files. and click OK. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and will place it on sheet E01. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . In later exercises.

7 On the ViewCube. and then press Esc. and Left sides converge. click Home. and then click the corner where the Top. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . Back. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor.6 Select the section box.

12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. right-click. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Walkthroughs. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. and click Apply View Template. select 3D HVAC Iso. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. select 3D Views. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. Click OK. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Under Names.

15 Using the same method. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. as shown. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Move the cursor down and to the left. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. (Right). 19 Complete the text labels. and click to specify the second leader point. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Typical. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper).

select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. 23 Click on the crop region. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 25 Click OK. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. select Crop Region Visible. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. under Extents. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing .To rotate and reposition a text label. as shown. and then click OK. and under Extents. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display.

select the isometric view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Click OK. Place a detail component. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).29 In the drawing area. select 3" = 1'-0". you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. click Training Files. and click Properties. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes.rvt. right-click the view name. Use detail lines to create a detail group. 3 In the Project Browser. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. For Scale. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. Drafting Detail Components | 353 .

for Sub-Discipline. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 9 Zoom in to the component. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. select Plumbing. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 12 On the Element panel. select Documentation. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. as the rectangle start point. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . For View Classification. Click OK. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. as shown. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. click the point at the top of the drain. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 13 In the drawing area.

23 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 22 Click Modify. and click OK. Concrete. 20 Select 1. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 18 With the filled region still selected. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. select C. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 21 In the drawing area. (Line).15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.I.P. for Type. select the filled region.

35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 34 Press Esc. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew.28 Click Modify. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. select Multiple. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. and then click to select them. 31 On the Options Bar.

and then select the side of the slab above the line. and then press Esc. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. (Rectangle). as shown.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 40 Click Finish Region. 45 Using the method learned previously. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring.

Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. as shown. 52 In the Create Group dialog.D. draw wide detail lines as shown. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and click OK. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. and then click to select them.. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. for Name.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. select the Flashing Membrane group. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. press Tab to highlight the chain. enter Flashing Membrane_F. 49 Click Modify. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines.

add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. as shown.55 Press Esc. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 61 Using the same method. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out.

A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. 72 If necessary. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16.62 Press Esc twice. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 71 Click Modify. 67 On the Options Bar. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 64 Press Esc twice. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then click OK. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. select Leader and Free End. as shown. and use the grips to resize the masking region.

73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Drafting Detail Components | 361 .Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and click to specify the text insertion point. 80 Press Esc twice. and click to specify the second leader point. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 78 Move the cursor to the left. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 76 To select the leader start point. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 81 Select the text note. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange.

click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 84 Using the following image as a guide. as shown. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing .82 Continue annotating the detail. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.

85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. and then press Esc twice.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. select the view title. open P103 . 90 Press Esc. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to place it. 88 In the drawing area.

364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. select Auto-Detect. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. select 3. For Import units. Click Open. select Visible. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. For Layers. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.dwg. click Training Files. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. For A-----NPP. Click OK. For Colors. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. select Black and White.rvt. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. for Line Weight.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. you import a CAD detail drawing.

14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. open P103 . and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 12 In the drawing area. 11 Press Esc. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.8 Type ZF. select the viewport title. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . and then press Esc.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful